User manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDigital CameraEX-TR50

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺮﻟﺍ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ

•.

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

• ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﻘﻠﻌﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

Summary of content (137 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-150‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬ ‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‪3.............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪9...................................................................
PAGE 5
‫❚❙‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪51 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) ...............................‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪52 .....‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪53 ..... (HDR) ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪) .............................‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪53 .....(HS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‪).......
PAGE 6
‫❚❙ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪79 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪81 ..................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪81 .......................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪82 ................................................................
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪) .........‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪106 ...(WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪) .................................................‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪106 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪107 ...‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪) ..........................‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪107 ...‬‬ ‫❚❙ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪108‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪108 ..................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 10
‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 13‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪ART SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫”‪ “ART SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ ،HDR‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 40‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 72‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻜﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻤﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻢ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺃﻭ ًﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-150‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [OPEN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (13‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 20
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.( ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮء‪/‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(120‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (17‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٥ ،‬‬ ‫‪15/7/10‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪10/7/15‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪7/10/15‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[OPEN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ( ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(38‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ( ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(45‬‬ ‫– )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪) +‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 47‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫”‬ ‫” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 58‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(55‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 35
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ“ ﻣﻦ ”ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(ART SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (53‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﺎﻣﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪.“ART‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪) Make-up‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪًﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.(Make-up‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ( ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ )‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫– ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫– ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )‪(BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪Make-up‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪HS‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪SR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(58‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪12M‬‬ ‫‪1.5X‬‬ ‫‪4.0X‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫‪2.9X‬‬ ‫‪7.8X‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫– ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪ ،HS‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪ ،HS‬ﻃﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪Full HD‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”‪ “Full HD‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “HD‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ”‪“o‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭ”‪ .“R‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ “o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “Full HD‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”‪ “HD‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 49
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎً ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ Full HD‬ﻭ‪.HD‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ”‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺢ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ”‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ )‪(HDR‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪) “HDR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪(HS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 “REC‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫– ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬ ‫– ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬ ‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 “REC‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 “REC‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪12M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫"‪5"×3.
PAGE 59
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 “REC‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.47‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 “REC‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0 EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+ 2.0 EV‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3 EV :‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 “REC‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ISO 3 MENU 3 “REC‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫‪ISO 80‬‬ ‫‪ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO 200‬‬ ‫‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫‪ISO 800‬‬ ‫‪ISO 1600‬‬ ‫‪ISO 3200‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 3 MENU 3 “REC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 33‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”|“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”|“ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “6‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”{“ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﺃﻭ ”}“ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“.
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”|“ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”~“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫¡ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ¢‬ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”]“ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻢ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ُﻇﻔﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫]‪[HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ“ ﻭ”ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ“ ﻭ”ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ“ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﻣﻤﻜﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 3M‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪.3M‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﺃﻭ ”‬ ‫“‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (73‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪.٣:٤‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”›“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫”›“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ُﺑﻌﺪ*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ*‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 80
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ EXILIM Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ EXILIM Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫“ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ًُﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.EXILIM Remote‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪ EXILIM Remote‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .iPhone‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ً‬ ‫‪ً EXILIM Remote‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺆﺧ ًﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 87
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(87‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ EXILIM Remote‬ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(95‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪) “Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪) “File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ﺛﻢ ”‪) “Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 92‬ﻭ‪.(95‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 94‬ﻭ‪.(97‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪.“DCIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫‪ QuickTime 7.
PAGE 96
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.22‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.99‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(99‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 99
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪.Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.55‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪+2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻓﻘﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،+1‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺴﺮﺍً‪ .
PAGE 101
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 87‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ“‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪءﺍً ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (103‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Language 3‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“Language‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪(HDMI) HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪HDMI 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﻭ” “ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“OK‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 109
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 110
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .
PAGE 111
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 112
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 113
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 114
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬ ‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 115
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 116
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .
PAGE 117
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 119
OpenVG 1.1 Reference Implementation Copyright (c) 2007 The Khronos Group Inc.
PAGE 120
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳُﻌﺰﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 26‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(107‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(107‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﻀﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪ .
PAGE 125
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(18‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-150‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء‪ (١ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(18‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ‪ .HDR‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(116‬‬ ‫‪ (٣‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 128
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(24‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SYSTEM ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ*‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪٢*microSD‬‬ ‫‪Full HD‬‬ ‫‪ ١٤٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫‪ ٣٠) ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫‪٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫‪ ١٠٫٩‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫)‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓ
PAGE 132
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ H.264/AVC ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ٤٩٫٩ :‬ﻡ ﺏ*(‬ ‫‪microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC‬‬ ‫* ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 1600 ،ISO 800 ،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬ ‫‪ ISO 3200‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪IEEE 802.
PAGE 134
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 135
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-150‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٩٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪) ٣٤٫٢‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٣٩٫٨ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٦٫٩ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 136
.‫ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬FCC ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THIS UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas). NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
PAGE 137
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.